Home

Ford 2007 F-150 Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. 6 6 321 Index Exhaust fumes ccccccceeeees 223 F Family entertainment system 44 Fluid capacities eee 312 POSlAINDS ksenia 82 Four Wheel Drive vehicles driving off road s 237 UE E E E N 296 calculating fuel ECONOMY riinarki 111 301 CAD S E E 298 capacil y crese oieee NER 312 choosing the right fuel 299 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates detergent in fuel filling your vehicle with PAG E E E 296 298 301 filter specifications 296 311 fuel pump shut off switch 245 improving fuel economy 301 octane rating 0 ee 300 315 Quality rrisnin i 300 running out of fuel 0 000 301 safety information relating to automotive fuels 296 Fuel pump shut off switch 245 FUSES eniron ei na 246 G Gas cap see Fuel cap 298 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 00008 301 GAUGES 20 aunt cctiese EE EE 14 H Hazard flashers ccccccceeeeeees 245 322 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Head restraints 141 147 148 Headlamps cccccccescceeesseeeeeeee 81 AUIS rren tes 84 autolamp system ccc0e 81 bulb specifications 00 86 daytime running lights 83 HASH to PASS orersantesesie 83 High BEAM xs ecsecneesassesssdenccestaceds 82 replacing bulbs ee 87 turning on and off 81 Heating heating and air conditioning S
2. Belts wrinkle my Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times more with don t wear often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people belts Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 thrown clear times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH 160 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Mind
3. 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1 4 of a turn until it stops 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light R or a check fuel cap message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 298 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or check fuel cap message on may cause the light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Motorcraft or other certif
4. 33 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt Q FOLDER In folder mode press lt FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available Eai 10 FF Fast forward Press FF EA Gag to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and E CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop T eats mode press and release to display track title artist name and isc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press ag
5. Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON position The fuel So gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in the ogoogo mi Driver Controls chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys To reset press and release the message center INFO button until TRIP appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press the control again to select Trip A and Trip B features Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset 15 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Quick start How to get going AN Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the
6. The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of injury in a collision 154 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two types of locking modes described below Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position if equipped
7. Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 LOCK position e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 LOCK position e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors or the trunk was opened the battery saver will shut off them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 LOCK position The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 LOCK position 133 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key open the trunk e recall memory seat power mirrors positions if equipped The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation COX amp Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats and mirrors if equipped To create your o
8. Windshield washer Push the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick push and hold the wipers gt will swipe three times with washer fluid e along push and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper features if equipped with Autolamp feature The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on headlamp control in the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on for a fixed period of time 91 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull down and hold the steering wheel release control 2 Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location 3 Pull the steering wheel release control up This will lock the steering wheel in position A Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving
9. a ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK 62 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is English Subtitles Select SUBTITLES to turn the subtitle option on or off The system default is OFF Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent Audio CDs To play audio CDs on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert an audio CD into the DVD system label side up 4 The track and elapsed time will co AUDIO DISC ma 2 00 54 appear in the status bar Use the DVD cursor controls on the bezel to highlight which track you would like to play You can also use the cursor controls to highlight COMPRESSION SHUFFLE or 63 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems SCAN Once you have highlighted the desired track or function press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm your selection COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the curren
10. 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is ON Rs An RSS control on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off in any gear the ignition must be ON An indicator light on the control will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light aes when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a failure in the Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 236 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a ful
11. 312 L g NUUS unsere ranuie nna 259 Lumbar support seats 142 M Message center seccricrrevesir 110 english metric button 115 system check button 114 warning Messages i 116 Mirrors nsccsiiersiorsseihixasaessaeete 97 98 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index automatic dimming rearview WMIFLOR aciscesdesiesidisvengndesinasiadeenaces 98 LOD AWAY iiredas 99 heatet sis sce isivitecivacescesseexecesiacees 99 programmable memory 130 side view mirrors power 98 MOON POOP sereset 105 Motorcraft parts 281 296 311 N Navigation system 0 eee 73 o Octane rating 0 300 Oil see Engine oil 0 286 OVELATIVE ooo eeecccestccesesseeeeeenes 232 P Parking brake npcisrrucirisni 226 Parts see Motorcraft parts 311 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 000 151 Power adjustable foot pedals 99 Power distribution box See FUSES socne 249 Power door 10ckS nisrosiiiisa 122 Power MULTOYLS oo eeecceececeeeeee tees 98 Power DOING errereen 94 Power steering seisce 230 fluid checking and adding 307 fluid refill capacity 0 0 0 0 312 fluid specifications 312 Power Windows cccceseeeees 95 R RA GIO virsas inaner 16 20 28 323 Index Rear seat entertainment SYS LOM eera eaan AE E 44 Relays enaa aee ia 246 Remote entry system 128 129 illuminat
12. All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac operation If the AdvaceTrac system is activated for an extended period of time the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the brakes to cool down A limited AdvanceTrac function using only engine power reduction will still help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will again function normally Anti lock braking is not affected by this condition and will function normally during the cool down period Do not alter or modify your vehicle s suspension or steering the resulting changes to the vehicle s handling can adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Also do not install a stereo loudspeaker near the front center console or under either front seat The speaker vibrations can adversely affect the AdvanceTrac sensors located in this area Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of an AdvanceTrac event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control system This system helps you maintain the stability
13. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 196 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you sus
14. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 155 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still working properly Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in a collision Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the front outboard seating p
15. DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspensi
16. ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp Slide on rod feature The visor will slide back and forth on the rod for increased sunlight coverage Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield 92 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE COMPARTMENT The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or similar sized objects Press the control to oo open the storage compartment IESO IES OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to full open position CLOCK IF EQUIPPED Press and release the button to adjust forward Press and hold to fast forward 93 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Utility compartment with coin ho
17. If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained 292 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS M97B51 A1 Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e Do not add mix an orange colored extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Specialty
18. POV valve Spark plugs 1The PCV valve is a critical emission component It is one of the items listed in the scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system For PCV valve replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as a Motorcraft or equivalent replacement part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 311 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V C6TOCNISM TO OVIMGLAX V L6TOCW dSM TO 06MO08 AX A eNOOddN WO S LX d 60IN VSa GTX 10 PDX V c9O9IW SSM O T Wd UOTIVIYIIedG pIo JoquMY Jed P10 queouqn y oxy Ieey oneyjuss CIETO seouno gT OFT MSL AVS YeII0J0N queoLqn oxy Ieoy unrerg TST stud p g 06 M08
19. USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Pp 8 0A Low beam headlamps right Pp 15A __ Interior lights Cargo lamps 12 7 5A Memory seat mirror switches Memory module 15 OA Climate control s i Spare _____ Spare 17 All power lock motor feeds Decklid release PST 20A Spare CSSC C zC a 31 10A Compass Automatic dimming rear C ee Ef 35 10A Steering rotation sensor FEPS Rear park assist Heated seat modules 248 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse 38 20A Subwoofer Audiophile radio P89 20A Radio o 40 0 pe us Mic mirror Moon roof Front lock switches Radio o a2 loa Spare S oo o a o oA Spare S a oA Spare S BE and rear wipers Front blower mien Occupant Classification Sensor OCS Passenger Airbag Deactivation Indicator PADI Breaker Ces Delayed accessory relay Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery
20. advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats e Push the control located on the B i climate control system panel once to activate high heat e Push twice to activate low heat e Push a third time to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated For low heat one light will be lit for high heat both lights will be lit 146 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat power mirrors and adjustable pedals to two programmable positions The me
21. airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate 166 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e achild or a small person occupies the front passenger seat The front passenger sensing system will turn off the passenger seat side airbag if e the seat is empty and safety belt is unbuckled The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or C PASS AIRBAG OFF 2 pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to rem
22. fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are two types of belt positioning booster seats e Those that are backless gt If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield and use the lap shoulder belt If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head top of ear level above the top of the a ae seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap shoulder belts Those with a high back If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with lap shoulder belts if your child is over 40 Ib 18 kg 179 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sol
23. gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt SEEK SEEK P gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 P gt 1 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD and DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter for further information OK Use in various menu selections Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features Refer to the SYNC supplement for further information 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode Ea press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder
24. leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 280 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Car Wash Canada only CXC 21 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant ZC 40 A Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner U S only ZC 11 A Motorcraft Leather Care Kit U S only ZC 11 D Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cl
25. performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires 190 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will no
26. refer to Headphone adjustments Also located here are the various auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR camcorder video games etc The specific jacks are as follows 1 Yellow video input 2 White left channel audio input 3 Red right channel audio input 4 Black wired headphone jack not included 67 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems The B headphone jack 5 is located on the right side of the DVD system 5 Plug in wired headphones not included here Os Note The B headphones can only access DVD and AUX modes They cannot access radio sources Audio displays Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system Status messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status Some possible radio display messages e SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY e DVD LOAD e DVD MENU e DVD STOP Audio interaction You can then also use the front audio controls to advance reverse play and pause a DVD While a DVD is playing you may use the following controls on the front radio e SEEK Press to advance to the previous lt q or next P DVD chapters e II Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD When the radio displays DVD MENU press PLAY on the radio memory preset 6 to play the disc Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a
27. sashcesssssduvievseeseisesscasteencencuseees 86 C Capacities for refilling fluids 312 CargO COVED serere ine ienrarauy nns 119 Carge NEW e dartieacevtasaieeteen 120 Cell phone USE cccecceessceeeeeeees 7 Changing a tire 0 252 Child safety restraints 177 child safety belts 0 0 00 177 Child safety seats 00 00 181 attaching with tether straps 185 in front Seat oo cceseeeeees 182 I Tear SCAb nro 182 Child safety seats booster SCAG cz E AE AOA 177 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 277 instrument panel 00 279 INGELIOL siese peee 279 Plastic parts wo eeeeeeees 277 WASHING soererenrorinre iiai 275 WAKING scsvcigeiiscisessanresdcasaecvat estes 276 WEE Sekinin ana 276 wiper blades sepies 278 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 76 78 GIOCK ranronne nere 93 Clock adjust 6 CD in dash 2s fe cccscssctedeeeieeoett 29 AM FM CD ssas arrarena 21 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 112 Console Overhead srac aa 93 Controls POWET Seat ssiri 144 steering column eee 103 Coolant checking and adding 291 refill capacities s s 295 312 specifications cccceeeeeeee 312 Cruise control see Speed control 100 Cupholder s icisariitrsesisss 149 Customer Assistance 000 243 Ford Extended Service Eg e oS 271 Getting assistance outside the U S and Can
28. testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester 014 R1060 The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 291 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Enables calibrated gauges to work properly When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty
29. type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 199 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s
30. 12V6W Dome reading lamps 578 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer Replacing the interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp low beam bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position then open the hood 2 Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulbs and connectors 3 Remove the outboard rubber boot from the lamp assembly by pulling rearward 4 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing headlamp high beam bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position then open the hood 87 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights 2 Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets and connectors 3 Remove the inboard rubber boot from the lamp assembly by pulling rearward 4 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out Handle a halogen he
31. 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 264 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On FWD vehicles if your vehicle is to be towed from the front ensure proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment it is recommended that the front wheels drive wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle On AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
32. 22 kg in the Aa net sS This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision 120 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle is equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters KTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle and a remote keyless entry transmitter Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle using a non programmed key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your authorized dealer supplied IKTs replacement IKTs are available through your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter Note Your vehicle s IKTs were issued with a tag on them that Fee once B provides important vehicle key c KKK Sie information It is recommended a l ji HEE you maintain the in a safe place 2 for future reference Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your vehicle it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter KT be handled properly when starting a
33. 34 F 386 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage 294 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this s
34. 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags side airbags and safety canopy Refer to Side airbag system later in this chapter one or more impact and safing sensors Safety belt pretensioner a readiness light and tone diagnostic module and the electrical wiring which connects the components Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal
35. 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with optional P225 55R18 tires Install cable chains securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the cables If this does not work remove the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cables on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all s
36. 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the
37. A Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 97 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare Without voice activated Navigation System or SYNC a e With voice activated Navigation LEERE System or SYNC C N 8 The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors i A Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 98 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls To adjust your mirrors _ Ca 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the
38. Assistance In Canada Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 565 3673 FORD www ford ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 521 4140 TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com In Canada Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 387 9333 www lincolncanada com In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle please have the following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized dealer is located e The year and make of your vehicle e The date of vehicle purchase e The current odometer reading e The vehicle identification number VIN Additional Assistance If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute you may wish to contact the Better Business Bureau BBB AUTO LINE program U S only 268 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
39. CC Noted o CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving e do not brake heavily e gradually decrease the vehicle s speed e hold the steering wheel firmly e slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used 252 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel tha
40. Customer Assistance In some states in the U S you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within
41. Empty e Average Fuel Economy e Trip Elapsed Drive Time e Compass Display e Compass Zone Adjustment e Compass Calibration Adjustment Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO menu estimates approximately XXX FILES TGE how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under NW OO0080 0 ni normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel 110 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and a single tone when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected Average fuel economy AFE Select this function from the INFO A to display E a XX X AVG APG uel economy mm miles gallon or liters 100 i NW OOCG8B 6 ni If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing 100 miles traveled by gallons of fuel used kilometers traveled by liters used your figure may be different
42. Low Tire Pressure p Warning 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Service engine soon The Service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the Service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance Q M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD ID has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking eng
43. Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Flash to pass Pull toward you to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the ON position e the headlamp control is in the OFF autolamps or parking lamp position and e the transmission must be out of the Park position Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the Boe instrument panel and all applicable C3 switches in the vehicle during i headlamp and parking lamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full Dome ON position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions 83 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehic
44. Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons Battery replacement mit Y Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit Headphones Wireless headphones The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road 55 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones below 56 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw at the bottom of the cover Then lightly press down on top and slide th
45. There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed 38 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Dont e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 39 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be Y inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the gt CD to be
46. VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 4 D e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal Y INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamps and map lamps The map lamps are located on the overhead console Press the controls on either side of each map lamp to turn on the lamps 85 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Your vehicle may also have reading lamps within the rear dome lamp s Press the switches on either side of the dome lamp to turn on the lamps BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp Condensation The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure When moist air enters the headlamp s through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur This condensation is normal and will clear within 45 minutes of headlamp operation Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Trade 3457A or 3457AK amber 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Function Number of bulbs Web number Fog lamp if equipped H11 Map lamp
47. affixed to a r WTAE N vehicle and prescribe where the wr tg Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX C PSLCOLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR Compliance Certification Label is EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar TE aa t poo by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s UO ANT OM AN A ITA door EXT PNT _ XX RCXX D30 WB BRK TINTTR PPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXK XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number 316 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint System O 3 Vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission transaxle code on the MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO f ificati DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Safety Compliance Certification FRONT GAWR XXXL
48. again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 22 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A to turn on off When the six strongest stations are fill
49. air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover la 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing Zi HELE V 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 310 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 3 5L V6 Engine Engine air filter element FA 1884 Battery BXT 59 Oil filter FL 400 SB12
50. airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control 165 2008 Taurus
51. allows the driver to control the availability of f the AdvanceTrac system AdvanceTrac system status is indicated by the AdvanceTrac indicator light in the instrument cluster when the system is deactivated The AdvanceTrac system cannot be deactivated when the vehicle speed is above 45 mph 70 km h even though the AdvanceTrac indicator light may be illuminated in the instrument cluster If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac system the AdvanceTrac indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on Have the vehicle system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately If the vehicle is stuck in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand switching off the AdvanceTrac system may be beneficial so the wheels are allowed to spin If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while driving in deep sand or very deep snow switching off the AdvanceTrac stability enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the AdvanceTrac performs a system self check During AdvanceTrac operation you may experience the following e A rumble or grinding noise e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The AdvanceTrac indicator light will illuminate e If your foot is on the brake pedal you will feel a vibration in the pedal 228 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving
52. and steerability of your vehicle It is especially useful on slippery road surfaces The system operates by detecting and controlling wheel spin The system borrows many of the electronic elements already present in the anti lock braking system ABS Wheel speed sensors allow excess wheel spin to be detected by the Traction Control portion of the ABS computer Excess wheel spin is controlled through either engine or brake torque reduction This is realized via the fully electronic engine control system This process is very sensitive to driving conditions and very fast acting The wheels search for optimum traction several times a second and adjustments are made accordingly The Traction Control system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction on slippery surfaces The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on snow and ice covered roads 229 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving During Traction Control operation the engine will not rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior If you should become stuck in deep snow or on a very slippery road surface try switching the Traction Control system off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out or enable a successful rocking maneuver Remember to switch the Traction Control system back on once the vehicle is
53. authorized dealer for availability 6 gt 11 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD and Pees DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD or DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features Refer to the SYNC supplement for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this section 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt Q FOLDER In folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 25 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 10 FF Fast forward Pr
54. authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously N 4 programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 LOCK position to the 3 RUN position Keep the ignition in the 3 RUN position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 LOCK position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from the 1 LOCK position to the 3 RUN position Keep the ignition in the 3 RUN position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 LOCK position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 LOCK position to the 3 CRUN position Keep the ignition in the 3 RUN position for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an Integrated Keyhead Tra
55. be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal 239 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission AWD system components or axles are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU Power Transfer Unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating drives
56. before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 308 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid C M level is in the add range or does not 4 4 D show at all on the dipstick Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 149 F 65 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving The transmission fluid should be within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 149 F g 4 65 C High fluid level F
57. belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints 153 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming a from until you hear a snap and feel Kk r it latch Make sure the tongue is i securely fastened in the buckle 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts While you are fastened in the safety belt the combination lap shoulder belt adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 8 km h or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement Energy Management Feature Front Outboard e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision
58. carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 215 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1 000 Ib 454 kg gross trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb 45 kg Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully after towing Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of t
59. coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter portion of the IKT to your vehicle Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight can be IKTs with remote entry functionality Tips e Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs or standard SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible 137 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security e If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your
60. costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the Service engine soon C indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the Service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the ON position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the Service engine soon tc indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the Service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 306 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OB
61. dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle AWD system or vehicle 265 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Place the transmission in N Neutral e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 266 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty repairs While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
62. drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 44 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and is compatible with CD R W CD R and certain CD ROM media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information Quick start Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control To play a DVD in the DVD system The DVD system can play DVD Video DVD R DVD R W discs as well as audio CDs and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints scratches and cleanliness Clean with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up to turn on the system It will load automatically 3 Press the power button on the DVD pla
63. equipment provider All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground This will cause damage to your AWD system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider 218 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground follow these instructions e Tow only in the forward direction e Release the parking brake e Place the transmission shift lever in Neutral N e Turn the key in the ignition to the ACC position refer to Starting in the Driving chapter The ACC position also unlocks the steering wheel e Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop 219 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 LOCK locks the gearshift lever and allows key removal This position also shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off La 2 ACC allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running 3 RUN all
64. expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca 244 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL A The hazard flasher is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated The fuel pump shut off switch is located in the front passenger f footwell area in the right upper corner To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition OFF 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition ON 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to OFF 6 Make another check for leaks 245 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS F
65. few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are three levels of control of the FES buttons The states are OVIOWIWOCI FULL enabled LOCAL or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as 68 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCAL The FES has control over the secondary source headphones only The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary speaker audio source LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset EB E ED EB C Ce controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers General information Note DVDs are fo
66. from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position 233 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transaxle operates in gears one through six D Drive with Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist Pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever activates two features at the same time Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist 1 Overdrive Cancel e Overdrive is deactivated e The transaxle operates in gears one through five e The O D OFF lamp in the 0 D instrument cluster is illuminated OFF 2 Grade Assist e Improves driving experience in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by providing additional grade engine braking an
67. government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA AB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 189 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature AB C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of
68. has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 249 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Joga Chee TEELE E EFFERRE 42 s a 4 j4 6 7 The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box PT 80A SPDJB power O PT 80A SPDJB power ooo o 3 30a Front wipers S E PT CC Notus S oo 7 50a Engine cooling fan PT CC Notus o 40A Anti lock Brake System ABS AdvanceTrac pump POT 80A Starter o 11 50A Powertrain Control Module PCM relay 250 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box PST CC Noted o PDC Noted o H o Backup relay _ 15A Fuel relay Fuel pump driver module Fuel pump a o O Mosa C a I oO o o Not se SS E E p40 Noted SSS Pai Not sed SOS 251 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box 45 10A Speed control deactivate switch Mass O SE ew aenor tne module UPR Full ISO relay PCM relay PT CO Notsed ooo P52 TC i Notsed oo PGT CC Noted o PBT
69. help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head The head restraints can be moved up by pulling up on the head A restraint 141 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Push release button to lower head restraint l Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the seatback Move the control up or down to adjust lumbar support Folding down the front passenger seatback The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load To fold the seatback 1 Move the seat as far back as possible 2 Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint fully down 3 Pull the strap located on the back of the seat to fold the front passenger seatback 4 Without releasing the pull strap push the seatback forward 5 Move the seat as far forward as possible 142 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatba
70. inflated Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn OFF Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 207 Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in Light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning li
71. left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Fold away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Heated outside mirrors Li if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror 4 glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift A lever is in the P Park position Press and hold the rocker control located on the instrument panel to v adjust accelerator and brake pedal e Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you 99 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals towards you The adjustment allows for approximately 2 8 inches 71 mm of maximum travel Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving Memory feature if equipped The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along wi
72. no longer stuck Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a Traction Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level See Checking and adding power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the maximum level as this may result in leaks from the reservoir See Checking and adding power steering fluid in the
73. not erase your vehicle s previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Radio control features Press MEDIA to select e AM FM1 FM2 e SATI SAT2 or SATS Satellite Radio mode if equipped e CD o LINE IN Auxiliary input jack Cif equipped 103 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls In AM FM1 or FM2 mode e Press SEEK to access the next previous strong station In Satellite radio mode Cif equipped e Press and release SEEK to access the next previous strong station e Press and hold SEEK to fast advance through preset channels or subscribed channels In CD mode e Press SEEK to listen to the next track on the disc In any mode e Press VOL up or down to adjust the volume e Press MUTE to mute the volume Navigation system hands free control feature if equipped Press Wy briefly until the voic
74. not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines 278 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth you may also use Motorcraft Dash amp Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A on the instrument panel and interior trim areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect r
75. o essaiseeadcveraceeresicers 171 All Wheel Drive AWD driving off road oo ees 237 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 0 291 Anti lock brake system SCG Brakes erspncerenirecgsr 225 Anti theft system 135 139 arming the system 0 006 139 disarming a triggered Syste Soenen 140 Audio system see Radio sineinecerest 16 20 28 Automatic transaxle fluid AUGING ge ccssecivieeissceseeverss 308 fluid checking 2c 28 ce6s3 saieescees 308 fluid refill capacities 312 fluid specification 0 312 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETOTIVE ooo ceeecceeeseseeeeteeeeees 233 Auxiliary input jack Line in 36 B Battery o cccccccsssccceesseceessseeeenes 289 320 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus acid treating emergencies 289 jumping a disabled battery 260 maintenance free 0 00 289 replacement specifications 311 SOT VICING soar nEn airean 289 Belt Minder cccccctceeeeeees 158 Booster seats ccccccccsecceessseeeees 177 BYAKES see2e 5 sedeccsdtsacdecncecsaessnsncat ence 225 ANGIE OCs AE 225 anti lock brake system ABS Warning Hohe osinaren 225 fluid checking and adding 308 fluid refill capacities 312 fluid specifications 312 lubricant specifications 312 joenatat ateue n aE 226 shift interlock someiisirssoriisess 231 BUDS
76. occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors located on the B and C pillars one sensor on each pillar on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated If the front passenger sensing system detects an empty seat the front passenger seat mounted side airbag will be deactivated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further en
77. operating at normal speeds have the electrical system checked as soon as possible CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW BRAKE FLUID Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the park brake is engaged If the warning stays on after the park brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire pressure monitoring system in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TRUNK AJAR Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reser
78. or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure 192 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls
79. protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood Several Safety Canopy system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 175 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the Safety Canopy system has deployed the Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy system including the A B and C pillar trim must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the Safety Canopy is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness airbag light same ligh
80. reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 144 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in map pocket if equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the front or rear portion to tilt the seat e Driver Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down e Driver Press the control to move the seat forward or backward e Passenger 145 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control Gif equipped to K x recline the seatback forward or rearward Heated seats if equipped Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of
81. recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy 302 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Driving style good driving and fuel ec
82. restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy and ae do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not eploy Important supplemental restraint system precautions Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably 163 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position Do not put anything on or over the airbag modul
83. right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Bounce Back Driver s window only When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the window is moving upward the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned OFF without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security Override If during a bounce back condition the switch is released to the neutral position then held in the one touch up position within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position the window will travel up with no bounce back protection If the switch is released before the window reaches fully closed or the ignition is turned OFF without accessory delay being active the window will stop Security override can be used if the window movement is restricted in some way for example if there is ice on the window or seals Accessory delay With accessory delay the radio Family Entertainment DVD System Cif equipped power windows and moonroof if equipped operate for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the OFF position or until one of the front doors are opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE
84. road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Listening to the radio 1 If the audio system is off press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AM FM repeatedly to choose between AM FM1 FM2 frequency bands 3 Press A IV to manually go up down the frequency band K T Press lt q SEEK p gt to search down up the chosen frequency band 5 7 for the next strongest station Ed To disengage SEEK mode press A IV 4 Once you are tuned to the desired station press and hold a nis Eas memory preset 1 6 to save the station PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six stations in each frequency band six in AM six in FM1 and six in FM2 To access your saved stations press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the station frequency will appear on the display 16 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Listening to satellite radio if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press A
85. seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled at a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times ending in the unbuckled state Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS The airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front 162 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries The term supplemental
86. settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion 37 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems USB port if equipped Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port inside your center console This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and also to charge devices For further information on this ow feature refer to Using your USB port in the SYNC supplement S GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors
87. speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law PQ 99 mph 159 kr O Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 200 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceabil
88. than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Fuel Information in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Trip elapsed drive time Select this function from the INFO menu to display a timer TIMER XX XX XX To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive nu ggggogao m Time perform the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 111 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer Compass display The compass heading is displayed in the lower left corner of the message center next to the odometer The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the ve
89. that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert an MP3 disc into the system label side up to turn on the ESAN DVD system It will load and ioeo automatically begin to play If there is already a disc in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 46 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 The disc will begin to play and DVD MP3 FOLDER TRACK 00 24 gt the MP3 Audio Disc screen will display and allow you to access the iomon auae COMPRESSION SHUFFLE SCAN and FOLDER MODE features OMP SHUFFLE SCAN BACK To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Press the power button to turn the DVD system on The indicator light next to the power button will C i llur I Lit lat ce 4 Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX 5 Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to DVD AUX If your source is properly plugged in it will appear on the LCD Liquid Crystal Display screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black If the video source is set to DVD AUX
90. the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components 285 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass Turn the blade at a right angle to the arm 2 Squeeze the locking tabs to release the blade from the arm and pull the blade away from the arm to remove it 3 Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 927 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 286 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Locate an
91. the display will automatically turn on if a video signal is detected 3 Connect an auxiliary audio video source by connecting RCA cords not included to the RCA jacks on the left hand side of the system e Yellow 1 video input e White 2 left channel audio input e Red 8 right channel audio input 47 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode 1 You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included 2 Press the headphone speaker button on the DVD player or press Lan the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is active able to be controlled 3 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information Using the infrared IR wir
92. the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different 150 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy
93. the seat in place If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases 188 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the
94. the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 41 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels over the internet U S customers only For i
95. to the coldest setting e Select A C and recirculated air C gt Use CED with A C to provide colder airflow e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort In extremely cold temperatures to maximize overall heater performance it is suggested to not operate the auxiliary system if so equipped until the engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Set the temperature control to full heat 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop 75 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED a 1 G47 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield To exit Q select another mode 2 Passenger temperature control Press to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle 3 G Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster in this section for more information 4 Recirculated air Press to act
96. until it stops To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms 288 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in scheduled maintenance information Ford production and aftermarket Motorcraft oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford mat
97. vehicle 4 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb straight from the socket Install new bulb s in reverse order Replacing high mount brake lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the ignition control is in the OFF position o 2 Open the trunk and reach under the decklid 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket Install new bulb s in reverse order 89 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position 2 Remove the two screws from the license plate lamp assembly 3 Remove bulb socket by turning counterclockwise 4 Carefully pull the bulb out from the socket Install new bulb s in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the OFF position 2 Remove the bulb socket from the fog lamp by turning counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector Install the new bulb in reverse order 90 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers
98. warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies or procedures please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 FORD Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com 267 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer
99. when the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door s The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition is turned to the 3 RUN position or e the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e after 25 seconds of illumination The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Perimeter lamps illuminated entry With the Integrated See Transmitter system the following items will illuminate when the unlock control on the transmitter is pressed e Headlamps e Park lamps e Tail lamps The lamps will automatically turn off e if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 RUN position or e the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e after 25 seconds of illumination Note On some vehicles the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature will not activate in daylight conditions Deactivating activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry You may enable disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to enable disable the perimeter lamps feature Note Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 LOCK position and all vehicle doors are clos
100. will not erase previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press the RES control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 101 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h Depress the brake pedal or press CNCL Cancel until the desired vehicle speed is reached press the SET control 102 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal or press CNCL Cancel This will
101. 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures direct sunlight high humidity a dusty environment 71 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems e locations where strong magnetic fields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air w
102. 2 fmt USA fus 121 121 122 135 141 141 149 162 176 189 189 191 204 210 216 218 220 220 225 229 231 243 243 245 245 246 252 259 260 265 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 267 Reporting safety defects U S only 273 Reporting safety defects Canada only 274 Cleaning 275 Maintenance and Specifications 282 Engine compartment 284 Engine oil 286 Battery 289 Engine coolant 291 Fuel information 296 Air filter s 310 Part numbers 311 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 312 Engine data 315 Accessories 318 Index 320 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2007 Ford Motor Company 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defe
103. A IV for Dual Play For further information on Single Play Dual Play refer to Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter FES FULL LOCKED Your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertaiment DVD system For further information on the DVD system refer to Family entertainment DVD system later in this section 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped ax LINE IN Auxiliary audio SAT1 SAT2 SATS Satellite radio modes if equipped and SYNC if equipped For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability For further information on SYNC refer to the SYNC supplement For further information on the DVD system refer to Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 32 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt gt to access the previous next Gseex 7 seexe strong station In CD mode press lt q hd to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt SEEK SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt SEEK SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt q SEEK SEEK
104. AVS Yeso10 0 1 ou LV 1196 pny A NOQYHN YLeIDIOJOW sqrenb OOL UOTSSTUISUBL OTJBULOINY queoqn y Joo pue SOYIeT 9JESIJT pue yung sSyoLIg yeas qoer pooy Areyrxne yoreyT pooy Yoyey 100 AMY PME Ld WUN I JSULIL IaMog ping AMY TeuetayjIp eY asvoly sodmg YmMNW pm ORIG IpTYIA 10 OJ IIOAIOSOI UO NIW LOG VuUeULIOJIOg pue XVI UseMjog YSTH Yeso101 0 IO DUeN 118g PIOA SAILIOVdVO ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd AONVNALNIVIN pm oyeg N m aa Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Taurus 500 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ayeryuaouo0D oa TaYSeA PIOTYSPUTA m ase V GE OZ umuq YeAXIOI0P ping JJ L A NOQY AN IOAIOSeI UO NIW WD S L X A NOOYAN YLIDIGOoN pue KYW Usemjog Pe10foo moyT a4 TV ISAL6IN SSM quase SULIO IG YIM 19 01 G L OA juefooy sulsug ploy syrenb TT Unud Ye1d10JOJL ping Joysea pleryspuryy pm SuLIae s IaMo0g quejooo sUTsUuy CepeueD TO IOJO W umuq Jadng OGMG AVS Ye1o10 0 SM TO 1040 Pus oneyqudAS UMUWI OGMG AVS Ye1o10 0 Jequmny jIeg ps0 A IO JUIN 118g PI0A YAR UOTROTAED IdV Pue V 0E6DGIN SSM epeury 6IdST OGMG OXD SN dS 0 MS OX 12 G send g g lo uSug 313 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Taurus 500 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SUNIY 10 SULpIIY eae PINJ 107 JeTeep pezlioyyne MOA 9aG TA nod ut peddmbe ATfeurst10 adAy yue ood 94 PPV yeu UOLO IdV 9U PUL V O 6OZN SSM UONPeoy
105. Anti theft system Flashes when AN the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated R Throttle Control Transmission Illuminates when a powertrain or an A AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the a o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators flash faster check for a burned out bulb High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened 13 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 14 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
106. Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Automatic transmission fluid dipstick Engine oil dipstick O oeANrnanr WH FR Engine oil filler cap 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 284 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 4 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in
107. CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP coverage It provides the following e Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase such as reimbursement for rentals coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer There are several plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage When you buy Ford ESP you receive Peace of Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada provided by a network of more than 4 600 participating authorized dealers 271 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle you may still be eligible Since this information is subject to change please
108. D II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and
109. English Metric e Autolamp Delay if equipped e Autolock if equipped e Autounlock if equipped e Easy entry exit seat Gf equipped System check Selecting this function from the SETUP menu causes the message T center to cycle through each of the RES ET FUR systems being monitored For each SYSTEM CHECK of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two to four seconds Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report is as follows OIL LIFE CHARGING SYSTEM WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOORS CLOSED TRUNK CLOSED BRAKE SYSTEM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM 8 DISTANCE TO EMPTY Oil life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS Nnonfk WW 114 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months perform the following 1 Press the SETUP control to enter SYSTEM CHECK then press SETUP vvva control again to display OIL LIFE OIL LIFE AAA D i XXX HOLD RESET NEW HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release OL LIFE Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE Hegia SET TO 100 is displayed SET
110. Introduction Instrument Cluster Warning lights and chimes Gauges Entertainment Systems How to get going AM FM stereo with CD AM FM stereo with in dash six CD Auxiliary input jack Line in USB port Satellite radio information Family entertainment system Navigation system SYNC Climate Controls Manual heating and air conditioning Automatic temperature control Rear window defroster Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement Driver Controls Windshield wiper washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control Moon roof Message center 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Table of Contents 4 10 10 14 16 16 20 28 36 38 41 44 73 73 74 74 76 80 81 81 85 86 91 91 92 95 97 100 105 110 Table of Contents Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti theft system Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Transmission operation Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 200
111. MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 307 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSAXLE FLUID Checking automatic transaxle fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transaxle does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not working properly i e if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool
112. Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort 230 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OPERATION Brake shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed 1 Apply the parking brake turn ignition key to LOCK then remove the key 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool remove the protective cover to the interlock release access hole on the console 3 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and press downward while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 4 Remove the tool and reinstall the protective cover 5 Start the vehicle and release the parking brake If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever it is possible that a fuse
113. NDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED i 1 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle e 2 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief Cx Re D description on each control setting 6 4 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents only to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle 4 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 7 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off A Distributes air through the floor vents Note You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the demister and defroster vents GA Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demisters and floor vents V7 Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield To exit Q select another mode 3 A Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation engages automatically with se
114. Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification WSS M97B44 D or DEX COOL brand with the factory filled coolant Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange colored extended life product such as DEX COOL brand with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to 293 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Speci
115. REAR GAWR XXXXLB Label The following table tells you XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG WITH which transmission or transaxle noo Fy Aa RES each code represents AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD 4f ATSXXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TP PS R TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6F50 6 Speed Automatic Transaxle 317 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the gr
116. Service engine soon C indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine soon C4 indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 305 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the Service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the Service engine soon K indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the Service engine soon C indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more
117. Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A IV to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode If your vehicle is equipped with an in dash clock refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter CATEGORY satellite radio if equipped early availability Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display CATEGORY MODE In CATEGORY MODE press amp V to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press lt SEEK SEEK B gt or SCAN to select the category After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK To select a different category press MENU until the category appears in the display Press A IV to select a different category You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Note If your vehicle is equipped with Satellite Radio you will either have the CATEGORY option above or the CATEOGRY option within the SATELLITE RADIO MENU below SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped late availability Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mo
118. TO 100 3 While OIL LIFE SET TO 100 is displayed if a lower oil life is desired press and release the RESET control to reduce the value Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent Note Oil life of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months For example setting oil life to 60 sets the oil life value to 4 500 miles 7 200 km and 108 days Language 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current LANGUAGE language to be displayed ss ENGLISH 2 Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of the language choices 3 Press and hold the RESET control to set the language choice Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt METRIC 2 Press the RESET control to change from English to Metric Autolamp delay if equipped This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 115 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 1 To disable enable the autolamp delay feature select this function T i from the SETUP control for the RUTOLAMP SEC current display mode lt gt 10 20 2 Press the RESET control to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds Autolock if equipped This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the
119. The media will show in the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode When in Single Play mode the media source will be displayed on the radio Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and DVD AUX sources 13 RETURN Press to return to the playing media or to resume eem playback 14 MENU When playing a DVD press MENU once to enter the DVD disc menu if available and press twice to enter the system set up menu From the set up menu you may select from Angle Aspect Ratio Language Subtitles Disc resume Compression Restore Defaults and Back For more detailed information refer to Menu mode 51 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 15 ENTER Press to select confirm the current selection 16 Cursor Brightness controls Use the cursor controls to make various selections when in any menu When not in a menu and in DVD mode press lt q gt to adjust the brightness A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness levels fod Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player 52 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA f
120. UX repeatedly to cycle through auxiliary audio sources ax Select SAT1 SAT2 or SATS to listen to satellite radio 3 Press lt Q SEEK SEEK P to access the previous or next satellite Gseex 7 seexe channel You may also seek by music category For further information refer to CATEGORY listing under the MENU control on your specific audio system 4 Once you are tuned to the desired channel press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the channel PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six channels in each six in SAT1 six in SAT2 and six in SATS To access your saved channels press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the channel name will appear on the display Listening to a CD MP3 if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press CD to enter CD mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD play will begin where it ended last 17 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems For a single CD system if a disc is not already loaded insert only one label side up into the CD slot LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display The first track on the disc will begin playing For an in dash six CD s
121. V SUC eaaa 74 76 78 Homelink wireless control SVSUCII csi oikeen AEE NARTA 106 HOGG terareon E 283 How to get going 0 0 16 I IGMITION orinni 220 315 Illuminated visor mirror 92 Infant seats see Safety seats oo 181 Inspection maintenance I M EENT AT aE T 306 Instrument panel cccceee 93 CLEANING eeoa 279 CISTET oeni roeier nE 10 lighting up panel and AGO TIOL ae suas eE ERE 83 J JACK e r E 252 POSIONINE ricana 252 IROI RET A T teoednangedassncteace 252 Jump starting your vehicle 260 K Keyless entry system 0 134 END IKO LOTE lt a ei ee 123 keypad ccseiecsecsesdeseasetecssevecneees 134 locking and unlocking doors 135 programming entry code 134 KEYS rR 121 137 positions of the ignition 220 L Lamps autolamp system c00000 81 bulb replacement specifications chart 86 daytime running light 83 FOS LAMPS eaen 82 headlamps cceccccceesseeeeeeees 81 headlamps flash to pass 83 instrument panel dimming 83 interior lamps ccce 85 87 replacing bulbs 87 90 Liftgate presoaren 130 Lights warning and indicator 10 anti lock brakes ABS 225 Load WMS 255 sissseiacdseedesiseheciarse 210 Locks AULOLOCK i iiisscscesseeabessdscenidisseteass 123 ChIGDLOOR sccsisivesisssscdeessyivessars 126 DOOI ne E A EE 122 Lubricant specifications
122. a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a c electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 17 C Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use 223 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can d
123. able from your authorized dealer 277 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 e For plastic headlamp lenses use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do
124. acement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 214 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to yo
125. act SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 43 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required NO TEXT Song title information Song title information not available NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Category information not available Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Category information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to re activate or resolve subscription issues FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that
126. ada cceees 272 Getting roadside assistance 243 Getting the service you TOOG EE ET 267 Ordering additional owner s literature sinssdsnneane es 273 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Progra eero aonane 271 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index D Daytime running lamps see LAMPS sseessacvshesreeescesascaaeces 83 Dipstick automatic transmission PUI essa EEE E EAT 308 ENGINE Oll suresinin 286 Driving under special CONCIIONS 0 eee 238 240 SIGs NEN sleek capi AEE 239 SNOW ANd ICE ou eeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 241 through water s 239 242 DVD SYStEM ccecceecceeeeteeeeeeee 44 E Electronic message center 110 Emergencies roadside jJump starting oo ee 260 Emission control system 304 BTS MNCS soroen ee aR 315 Cleaning ceire rere 277 COOIAND ccss4ccdsisMesaiasdceastacenissise 291 idle speed control 0 289 lubrication specifications 312 refill capacities srerossrisisss 312 SETVICE POINTS icrai ispir 284 starting after a collision 245 Engine block heater sece 223 Engine OI sasisscecsesnevecdeeteveesacnarne 286 change oil soon warning message Center ran 286 checking and adding 286 GIDSUICK as sscesavseadacasixsacrsdiewnsetacd 286 filter specifications 288 311 recommendations 288 refill Capacities wees 312 specifications eceeeeeeee 312 Event data recording
127. adlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position then open the hood 2 Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets and connectors 3 Locate the parking turn signal lamp electrical connector and remove it by pulling it straight off 4 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out 5 To remove the bulb pull it straight out of the bulb socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order 88 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing rear brake tail turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs The brake tail turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace either bulb e 1 Backup lamp e 2 Brake tailturn lamp e 8 Side marker lamp 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the trunk 2 Remove the cargo net fastener if equipped and carefully pull the carpet away to expose the backside of the tail lamp assembly 3 Remove the nut and washer assemblies then pull the lamp assembly away from the
128. ain to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 34 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK P gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt SEEK to view the previous display text 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 2 mode If a CD MP38 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot Gas number using memory presets 1 6 J When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not cho
129. al laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size restrain the child in a safety seat Children who are too large for child safety seats as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always wear safety belts Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child s face or neck the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 lb 18 kg and are around 4 years of age Although the lap shoulder belt wil
130. ance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification 201 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual 1b kg at psi kPa cold Indicat
131. anufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback Cif equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching 157 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints hardware should be inspected after a collision Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt ass
132. ask your authorized dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options or visit the Ford ESP website at www ford esp com GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you write or call FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the author
133. assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 243 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e e
134. at periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 152 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt precautions A Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained A Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety
135. ate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure including the spare if equipped at least monthly and before long trips You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 191 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is locate
136. atically exit zone setting mode RESET CHANGE if enough time passes without pressing a button Compass calibration adjustment Perform the following steps on an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Turn ignition to the ON position 2 Start the engine 3 Press the SETUP button repeatedly until the message center T displays RESET FOR RESET FO R N CALIBRATION CALIBRATION 4 Press RESET to enter compass calibration mode which will display CIRCLE SLGWLY CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE TO CALIBRATE Ns 5 Drive the vehicle in circles up to three times until the message CALIBRATION CALIBRATION COMPLETED COMPLETED appears and one of the 8 valid a headings N NE E SE S SW W NW is displayed 6 Verify that the calibration process has taken place by driving the vehicle in at least one circle confirming that the heading changes accordingly If this happens the compass has been calibrated successfully Otherwise if the display shows only one heading as the vehicle is being driven around repeat the procedure from Step 3 113 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Setup menu Press this control for the following displays e System Check e Oil Life e Language e Units
137. buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared CIR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel A This information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX 60 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Operation with an aftermarket audio system Headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e W
138. call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses Gif worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous u
139. can be folded down to provide additional cargo space To lower the seatback s from inside the vehicle pull the strap located on the outboard side of the seatback to release it and then fold seatback down When raising the seatback s make sure you hear the seat latch into place 148 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Seat mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with cup holders and a storage compartment they are located in the rear seat armrest To access the cup holders rotate armrest into use position To open the storage compartment Cif equipped pull up on the latch Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the a
140. cification chart BEIGANGS eri a 312 Speed control ccceeeeeeeee 100 Starting your vehicle 220 222 jump starting oe 260 Steering wheel CONELOIS aea 103 HNE ran 92 SYNG scacsaeessacnnevsagecanlieseisaaendadeancts 73 T Tilt steering wheel 92 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Roadside Emergencies 252 Tires Wheels and Loading 204 WEES ueneno 189 190 252 alignment sisscevadercctedssevscenesncones 197 CALE E E 193 CHANGING cas igcticessccsaans asses 252 255 checking the pressure 193 INTLAUING perenn 191 label siakiina 203 replacing cssccesnssorscnarsscazariccnscees 195 VOUAGING sidari eie seanns 197 safety practices c ccceee 196 sidewall information 199 snow tires and chains 209 Spare TPE csscescctdesssenscdadersisessdess 253 GEYMINOLOSY savcdsbisniscisiwvseesesrecds 190 tire grades nits ayes acnesscteveteessacce 190 treddweal saisscsscescscresy niece 189 194 TOWNE siveesctecssccisgteasdervetiseeseceesse 216 recreational towing 0 218 trailer towing 216 WLECKED sirens n aE 265 Traction control 00 229 Transaxle fluid checking and adding AUTOMATIC caissecrgncsacceeestesvecee 308 fluid refill capacities 312 lubricant specifications 312 Trans TAISSON 325 sis sss2ceeesvtvessetae 231 brake shift interlock BSI 231 TUNK oerrinne 127 130 remote release srsieso
141. ck to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward 143 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Pull lever up to adjust seatback Before returning the ge seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the ie re ee seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjusting the front power seat if equipped A Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop A Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips f Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back
142. come jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder TOO1 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 40 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Sy
143. cted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 1 A IV Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Also use in menu mode to select various settings In satellite radio mode if equipped press A v to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press A v to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to 20 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC which has a7 special phone features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings
144. ction replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal 108 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button ae Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry C door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot AT be erased e Press and hold the two outer O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not h
145. ctive or has been disabled by the driver or as a result of a system failure If the light remains on it indicates a Traction Control Fault Have the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information Traction Control if equipped Illuminates when the Low tire pressure warning Iluminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains ON at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to ON the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn ON or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tive pressure monitoring system in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter O 12 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Low fuel if equipped Iluminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged O D off Illuminates when the 0 D overdrive function of the transmission has been turned OFF OFF refer to the Driving chapter If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur
146. cts or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Australia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset t
147. cutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the UNLOCK control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter e the ignition is turned to the 3 RUN position Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note If the two stage unlocking feature is disabled all doors will unlock for more information regarding two stage unlocking refer to the Two stage wnlocking section earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or your personal code then press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being 135 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT programmed to your vehicle is used The u
148. d on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at
149. d substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating
150. d Loading e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram j J f e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram NANANA NANA NNAA YY NVANAAN SENAY Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires 198 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P
151. d as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition The importance of shoulder belis Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat the safest place for children to ride Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat Never put the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision 180 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision When installing a child safety seat e Revie
152. d carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL het If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range RIS O ONS SOOO If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter 287 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is xX ge overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated e Do not overfill the engine Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
153. d extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above This will increase engine RPM during engine braking Overdrive Cancel with Grade Assist is designed to provide optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function 234 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving To return to O D overdrive mode press the transmission control switch again e The O D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated e The transmission will operate in gears one through six O D overdrive mode is automatically returned each time the key is turned off L Low e Provides maximum engine braking e Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle speed allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h T
154. d feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET control and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories e They will not disappear until a condition is changed e They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition OFF ON cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle i Warning returns after 10 minutes Warning returns after the ignition key is turned from OFF to RUN DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger side door is not completely closed 117 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the left rear door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the right rear door is not completely closed FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is
155. d optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer 2 He GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO allowable weight of the fully loaded bolts sone Sie errr aren vehicle including all options XXKKKG WITH XXXXKG WITH equipment passengers and cargo XK Fis OOOK RIS The GVWR is shown on the AT XXX KPaIXX PSLCOLD AT XXX KPaIXX PSI COLD Safety Compliance Certification THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR Label located on the B Pillar or ECT On TIE DATE or MANUFACTURE SHOIMABDVE the edge of the driver s door VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX The GVW must never exceed the De ior GVWR AEE TTT EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TP PS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight ratin
156. de Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop 21 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK
157. ds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your veh
158. e Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your authorized dealer Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the a risk of injury in a collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back PENN 164 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the
159. e t icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press th again to end a voice command For further information on the Navigation system refer to the Navigation supplement 104 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped Press Wg briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold mg to exit voice command Press activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end call or exit phone mode Press OK to confirm your selection between the phone mode and voice command features For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up to ventilate the vehicle Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves The moon roof is equipped with an automatic one touch express opening and closing feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time To open the moon roof To open the moon roof press the rear portion of the control to the first detent To activate the automatic one touch express open feature press the rear p
160. e to ensure the alarm disarms e Turn ignition to the 3 ON position with a valid SecuriLock key or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding The alarm system will still be armed Pressing the power door UNLOCK control within the 20 second prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state Triggering the anti theft system The armed system will be triggered if e Any door the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the door key keypad or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT e The ignition is turned to the 3 ON position with an invalid SecuriLock key or IKT 140 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Notes Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop Adjustable head restraints To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion Head restraints
161. e break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty 301 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting Gow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the
162. e cover off When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing 57 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece e Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use 58 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wired headphones Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves The driv
163. e display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder Press B gt 11_ play pause when a CD MP3 is playing to pause the disc CD PAUSE will appear in the display Press again to resume play 4 For a single cd system press amp to eject the current disc a The display will read CD EJECT For an in dash six CD system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to 6 discs press and hold amp until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 19 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AM FM Single CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped OG AO MP3 v O re aa ers OO Gi Aste TT see REW FF lt FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE m l OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 eet ooo Driving while distra
164. e doors amp 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The turn lamps will flash 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors are closed Note If any door is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes Press again or turn the ignition to the 3 RUN position to deactivate or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3 minutes Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1 LOCK position 129 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Opening the trunk 5 Press amp 5 twice within 3 seconds to open the trunk e Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver s rear view Memory Seat Feature if equipped The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory seat mirror feature Press c to automatically move the seat mirrors to the desi
165. e to adjust brightness or when in menu mode to navigate through the menu ED C Press and release to go to the i ze gt SS selections Press to adjust volume levels SS Slow play 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 66 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Press and hold the reverse or advance button to enter into slow play mode Once in slow play mode press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle through 1 4 and 1 2 These will display on the status bar on top of the screen as the screens cycle through at this rate Frame by frame 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press the right cursor button The DVD will advance one frame Each P press of the right cursor button will advance the DVD video by one frame Headphone auxiliary jacks There are wired headphones not included and auxiliary jacks on the left and right side of your DVD system They can be used to plug in wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc On the left side of the system is the Headphone A input jack This G 2 3 4 headphone will listen to the media selected on the Channel A source When you need to make any V L R AYA adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the Channel A source is highlighted For more information
166. e vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to three inches One touch up or down Driver s window only This feature allows the driver s window to open or close fully without holding the control down To operate ONE TOUCH DOWN e Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal close or ONE TOUCH UP position during a ONE TOUCH DOWN event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal close or ONE TOUCH UP To operate ONE TOUCH UP e Pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal open or ONE TOUCH DOWN position during a ONE TOUCH UP event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal open or ONE TOUCH DOWN 96 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the
167. eas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure vehicle accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set 221 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Make sure the gearshift lever is in P Park 3 Turn the key to 3 RUN without turning the key to 4 START M j Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 RUN without G turning the key to 4 START 2 2 Turn the key to 4 START then N 4 release the key as soon as the engine starts Excessive cranki
168. eatedly to access Press A IV to optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A V to adjust 31 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder Mode Available only on MP8 discs in CD mode In Track Mode pressing A SEEK p will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing lt SEEK gt will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press lt Q FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press OK to close and return to the main menu Single Play Dual Play If Single Play is ON press
169. eatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessoriesstore com Exterior style Bug shields Moonroof deflector Side window deflector Splash guards Interior style All weather floor mats Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Carpeted floor mats Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Cargo organization and management TripTunes Advanced portable audio connection 318 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Accessories Peace of mind Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunica
170. eating and Safety Restraints Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy system its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy See your authorized dealer All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy system is provided To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy How does the Safety Canopy system work The design and development of the Safety Canopy system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors Cone on each side of vehicle 174 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment e The same readiness airbag light elect
171. ect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off highway usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom aA of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 242 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside
172. ection Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C J e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage 295 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water fo
173. ed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 132 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 RUN position N 2 Press the power door unlock q 4 control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 RUN position to the 1 LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 RUN position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds Note The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been deactivated The horn will chirp once and honk once one short and one long to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position to exit the procedure Note The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Illuminated exit e When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the ignition the interior dome lamps and the exterior mirror puddle lamps if equipped will illuminate The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the key is inserted in the ignition
174. ed the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release A SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A IV to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL s
175. ed entry 132 133 locking unlocking doors 129 opening the trunk 130 panic alarm ceeceeeeeees 129 replacement additional CLANSMILLETS 23 scssvssesesssesesesvessvdee 131 replacing the batteries 131 Reverse sensing system 235 Roadside assistance 0 0 243 S Safety Belt Maintenance 157 Safety belts see Safety restraints s 149 153 156 Safety Canopy ccce 171 173 Safety defects reporting 273 274 Safety restraints 149 1538 157 Belt Minder siise 158 extension assembly 157 fOr AJUTS oraninin 154 156 for children 00000 176 177 Occupant Classification DESOT raea TOE 151 safety belt maintenance 157 warning light and chime 158 Safety seats for children 181 Safety Compliance Certification Label 00000 316 Satellite Radio Information 41 DCAUS A E E EAEE 141 child safety seats 000 0 181 front seats seesmisi 141 143 heated en N 78 146 324 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus memory Seat 0 130 147 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSUCCINS 2 00 sides ssncaaobscneseshestersencente 135 Servicing your vehicle 282 Setting the clock AM FM single CD ou 21 AM FM In dash 6 CD 004 29 Spare tire see Changing the Tire 255 Spark plugs specifications s 311 315 Spe
176. efully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE class S cables or equivalent on the front axle for P215 60R17 equipped vehicles SAE class S chains or other conventional link chains may cause damage to the vehicles wheel house and or body Use of optional spike spider type traction devices or equivalent is also acceptable e Do not install tire chains cables or optional traction devices on the rear tires This could cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house or body 209 2008 Taurus
177. electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 START cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Starting your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures below 20 F 30 C it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above 50 mph 80 km h Normal operating temperature is normally reached after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage 220 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed ar
178. eless headphones 1 Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON 2 Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B control on the ear piece 3 Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece Using wired headphones not included Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves 1 Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either side of the DVD system Each side is labeled A Aor A B Headphones plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into jack B will listen to Channel B 48 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Adjust the volume levels using the volume controls on the DVD system VOLUME To adjust display brightness To decrease increase the brightness level on the display screen press the brightness control on the DVD system A display will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness level The brightness display will only appear when the menu is not displayed DVD player controls e Pame i w fa o lke 14 42 CO 1 Headphone control A B Press to select either
179. elines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 270 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes
180. embly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the ON warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the ON position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled 158 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine i
181. ent and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened I A V Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down Vv the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MP3 mode press to select the desired disc 28 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems In CATEGORY mode if equipped press to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel categories Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone Your vehicle may be equipped with the SYNC system gt A which has special phone features For further information refer to the SYNC supplement 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access to the following settings Setting the clock Press until SELECT HOURS o
182. epellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 to the wiped area and spread around evenly 3 Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 279 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning e If grease or tar i
183. er are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same key cycle The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park automatic transmission e The ignition switch is in the OFF position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN or ON position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 161 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately 1 minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50
184. er should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road You may purchase wired headphones for your FES Family Entertainment System Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located on the left and right sides of the system Channel A is located on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD system The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left side of the FES and is labeled A A Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel A source The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on the right side of the FES and is labeled B Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel B source Adjust the headphone volume using the volume control on the DVD system VOLUME Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media so
185. erial and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water 289 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighte
186. ering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AWD Systems if equipped AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
187. es the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 202 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to matc
188. ess FF re to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and Ea CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available on
189. eteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of energy per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after appro
190. ether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked with the tether anchor symbol shown with title The tether strap anchors in your a vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view n 8 L Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor 1 Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion 2 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 3 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position S m 185 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Open the tether anchor cover aN 5 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may
191. etting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A V to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise 23 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt q SEEK SEEK to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press lt Q FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available Press OK to close and return to the main menu COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level SINGLE PLAY DUAL PLAY if equipped If SINGLE PLAY is ON press A IV for DUAL PLAY For further information on Single Play Dual Play please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this section 4 AUX Pre
192. f a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately 5 minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned ON The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 3 mph 5 km h and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph 5 km h and more than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature is activa
193. fications remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to
194. fmt USA fus Locks and Security Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the 3 RUN position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1 LOCK or 2 ACC position and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the 1 LOCK or 2 ACC position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure or e or by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 LOCK position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and
195. fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Do not use fuel lines engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 262 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 263
196. g limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 213 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Do not use repl
197. g on it 183 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out and a click is heard a 6 Allow the belt to retract The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and x pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat N 8 Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt 9 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation 10 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2 through 9 Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use 184 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching child safety seats with tether straps is Most new forward facing child safety seats include a t
198. ght on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABs 11 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Airbag readiness If this light fails o to illuminate when the ignition is turned to ON continues to flash or IN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder P chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly Engine oil pressure Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the To normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Traction Control is a
199. ght still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure 208 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated car
200. h power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 240 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle If your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transaxle damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do n
201. h the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 203 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehic
202. hafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out Do not try to turnaround because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too muc
203. hance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions 172 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety Canopy system 4 Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision 173 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus S
204. has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 231 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Adaptive Learning Your transaxle is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in the vehicle computer This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transaxle may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transaxle Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transaxle operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned 232 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed automatic transaxle P Park This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels
205. he indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may PAS automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming se
206. he switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compoun
207. he system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the RSS This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 235 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to six feet two meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches
208. he vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle See your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper Use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners 216 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The bra
209. hen a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A amp B will be connected to FES DISC Menu mode Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if available Press MENU twice to access the DVD set up menu and the following features 1 ZOOM 2 ANGLE 3 ASPECT RATIO 4 LANGUAGE 5 SUB TITLES TSS CCEE om Angle mode Select ANGLE to select various angles of view for the DVD LANGUA SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK 61 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems This is disc dependent some DVD discs may have more viewing angles to select from Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is Angle 1 Aspect ratio Select ASPECT RATIO to select the viewing size and shape of the video displayed on the LCD screen This is disc dependent SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK You can select from WIDE LETTER BOX or PAN SCAN Once you have SELECT THE DESIRED ASPECT RATIO made your selection press ENTER WIDE 16 9 to confirm The LCD screen display LETER BOX will immediately change to your cea selection after the system resumes playback of the DVD The system ee BACK e default is WIDE 16 9 Language Select LANGUAGE to select the language you would like to use for audio output English Spanish ZONA French This is disc dependent
210. hese objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER S The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice The ignition must be in the 3 RUN position to operate the rear window defroster The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to the 1 LOCK position To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed push the control again Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 80 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus HEADLAMP CONTROL O Turns the lamps off p Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise to Wy e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise to The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK You can change the amount of time the lam
211. hicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Compass zone adjustment Perform the following steps on an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Turn ignition to the ON position 2 Start the engine 3 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 112 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 4 Press the SETUP control repeatedly until the message center T says RESET FOR ZONE SETTING RESE FOR ZONE SETTING 5 Press the RESET control to enter Zone Setting mode 6 Press RESET repeatedly until the S desired zone setting is displayed ZONE lt XX gt The message center will ccT autom
212. icator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the
213. icator f A will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the 3 RUN position the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 RUN position If this occurs the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an authorized dealer for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1 LOCK position 136 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security The theft indicator will flash every AN two seconds to act as a theft deterrent when the vehicle is f R armed Automatic disarming The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the 3 RUN position The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly have the system serviced by your authorized dealer Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters IKT and coded keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter A maximum of eight
214. icle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling and e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement 6 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Cell phone use The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others
215. ied fuel filler cap is not used The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury bp Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that are blended with a maximum of 85 ethanol The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Do not use fuel containing methanol It can damage critical fuel system components 299 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Studies indicate that these additives can cause your vehicle s emission control system to deteriorate more rapidly Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 We do not recommend the use of gaso
216. ill condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion Compatibilit
217. in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control it may be beneficial to disengage the Traction Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control 238 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt ste
218. in the trunk and risk injury Children should be taught not to play in vehicles On hot days the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries including brain damage Small children are particularly at risk 127 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The IKT allows you to e remotely unlock the vehicle doors remotely lock all the vehicle doors remotely open the trunk activate the personal alarm ll operate the illuminated entry C feature YV e arm and di
219. ind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located above the glove box on the instrument panel Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 167 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front
220. indshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 47 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system OFF or with recirculated air engaged 79 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e For maximum cooling performance MAX A C In AUTO mode press AUTO control and set to desired temperature In manual override mode select 74 or 4 A C and recirculated air A and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has aired out In extremely cold temperatures to maximize overall heater performance it is suggested to not operate the auxiliary system if equipped until the engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 7 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan to the highest speed 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as t
221. ine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer 10 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Iluminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service engine soon warning light to come on refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specification chapter Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the B RAKE ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running or in a position between ON and START or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer Check fuel cap if equipped wv Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning li
222. ing on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift into the L gear position Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle for personal travel such as behind a motor home or a truck In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle please refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the
223. inrti 119 Turn Signal 0 eee eeeeeeteeeeees 85 U USB POTT issescacstentercssssiecssvevecs canes 38 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index V Vehicle Identification Number OIN irrin 316 Vehicle loading iiiaio 210 Ventilating your vehicle 223 WwW Warning lights see Lights 10 Washer fluid woe eee 285 Water Driving through 242 Windows DOWD sneissGiectssiesersapiaadaviasasiecaeceed 95 Windshield washer fluid and WIDETS sanien eiieeii 91 checking and adding fluid 285 replacing wiper blades 286 Wrecker towing iiiaae 265 325 326 327 328
224. ion Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off 30 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV to turn on off When the six strongest stations are fi
225. istributes air through the windshield defroster demister and floor vents 9 Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 10 i Driver heated seat control Press to heat the driver seat Press once to activate high heat two indicator lights Press again to activate low heat one indicator light Press again to deactivate the driver heated seat 11 Front fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 12 EXT Press to display outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings 13 F C Temperature conversions Press to switch temperature display between Fahrenheit and Celsius 14 OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate control system is turned off 15 Driver temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature on the driver side of the cabin Sets the passenger side temperature also when DUAL is disengaged The recommended vehicle cabin setting is between 72 F 22 C and 75 F 24 C 16 AUTO Press to engage automatic temperature control Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the w
226. it and Celsius 14 OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate control system is turned off 15 Driver temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature on the driver side of the cabin Sets the passenger side temperature also when DUAL is disengaged The recommended vehicle cabin setting is between 72 F 22 C and 75 F 24 C Dual temperature control Press and hold the AUTO button to engage disengage separate passenger side temperature control 16 AUTO To engage automatic temperature control press AUTO and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 77 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control with heated seats if equipped an Tee 5 oS 1 G47 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield To exit Q select another mode 2 Passenger temperature control Press to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle 3 Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster in this section for more information 4 DUAL Dual
227. ity This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resist
228. ivate deactivate air recirculation in the cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections 5 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO defrost and floor defrost 6 Y Distributes air through the windshield defroster demister and floor vents fe A Distributes air through the floor vents Note You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the demister and defroster vents 76 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 8 J Distributes air through the instrument panel and floor vents 9 A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 10 Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 11 Front fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 12 EXT Press to display outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings 13 F C Temperature conversions Press to switch temperature display between Fahrenhe
229. ized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 272 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or call For a free publication catalog order toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Ctems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French owner s guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar comp
230. king system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Do not connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle s tail lamps This can cause damage to your vehicle s electrical system See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e It is recommended to select the L Low gear position when additional engine braking is needed In situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades e driving in mountainous areas additional engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating e Anticipate stops and brake gradually Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information 217 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before start
231. l off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal 70 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene paint thinner or any other solvent Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part
232. l provide some protection these children are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly which could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash 177 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they weigh about 80 Ib 86 kg about 8 to 12 years old Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 178 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA
233. l time All Wheel Drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no maintenance If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Driving off highway with AWD vehicles AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds off highway under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and tra
234. laints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company 273 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http hvww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 274 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Always use a clean sponge o
235. larly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed 303 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker These numbers represent the Range of MPG L 100 k
236. layer as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you Do not disassemble the player The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm 4 75 in audio compact discs and digital versatile discs DVD only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD players Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs 65 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the FES DVD system The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Playing a DVD 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the navigation system is on 3 Insert a DVD label side up into the system 4 Use the DVD bezel controls to Press to play or pause a DVD Press to stop or eject a DVD previous chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse search Press and release to go to the next chapter Press and hold for a fast forward search Press when not in menu mod
237. lder a clamshell tray audio input jack USB port and power point 3 Rear power point vent and if equipped a cupholder 4 Pen holder Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty The auxiliary power points are located on the instrument panel and A in the center console utility compartment AN Do not use the power point for _ ri Ey operating the cigarette lighter J element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses 94 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e d
238. le AdvanceTrac enhances your vehicle s stability during maneuvers that require all available tire traction like in wet snowy icy road conditions and or when performing emergency maneuvers In an emergency lane change the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction and have better control of the vehicle Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac include e Accelerating on a slippery surface e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Hitting a patch of ice Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa 227 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Hitting a curb while turning e Cornering at excessive speeds while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The AdvanceTrac system automatically turns on when the engine is started However the system does not function when the vehicle is traveling in R Reverse If you are operating the speed control system and road conditions change causing the AdvanceTrac to activate the AdvanceTrac will disengage the speed control When driving conditions permit you can return to speed control by pressing the RES control Refer to Speed control in the Driver controls chapter The AdvanceTrac button
239. le s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the 204 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA f
240. le has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ay ground and mark an 8 foot G 2 5 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 4 On the wall or screen you will observe an area of high intensity light The top of the high intensity area should touch the horizontal reference line if not the beam will need to be adjusted using the next step 84 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or KS counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps Pa HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS
241. lection of MAX A C or can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 4 Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster in this section for more information 5 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C G87 defrost and amp floor defrost Cannot be disabled in MAX A C mode 74 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 6 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the airflow selector in the O OFF or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e For maximum cooling performance MAX A C In the MAX A C mode e Move the temperature control selector to the coldest setting e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort Inthe W and modes e Move the temperature control selector
242. lines labeled as Regular that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet
243. lled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle RBDS ON OFF When REDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release A SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A V to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use W to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Available on Audiophile radios only Press MENU rep
244. llover 211 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only CARGO Cargo Weight TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs 7 MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 PS ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL XX FRONT XX REAR x NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see owners MANUAL DIMENSIONS PRESSION AFROID Eon noomona LT22575R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI baranes CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29psi DUPROPRIETAIRE POUR DE PLUS SPARE T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI AMPLES SECOURS P225 60R17 200 KPA 29PS RENSEIGNEMENTS XXXXXKXXXXXXXXK XXX XX XXXX XXXX weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 212 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo an
245. lockwise 2 Lift and remove the spare tire from the trunk 3 Remove the second wing nut that secures the jack retention bracket by turning it counterclockwise remove the jack kit from the vehicle 4 Remove the jack and the wrench from the felt bag Fold down the wrench socket to use to loosen the lug nuts and to operate the jack Tire change procedure When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park 255 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transaxle in P Park set the parking brake and block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 2 Remove wheel cover if equipped with the lug wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 256 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide pos
246. luid levels above the safe range C MIN P MA Ses MAX may result in transaxle failure An 4 4 ie overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transaxle component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 mL increments through the filler tube until the level is correct 4 309 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transaxle components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the Motorcraft
247. ly with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK B gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text 26 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 14 AM FM Press to select A AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 Ne mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a CD MP3 18 CD slot Insert a CD MP3 label side up in the CD slot 27 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Premium Audiophile AM FM in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped CaS DEAA v oO MENU _ 3 a4 ada aseek TX seme 1 3H pr aac aad aide as g OK Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accid
248. m expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM C4 Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system 304 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the Service engine soon Cc ind
249. ments in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Rear facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 182 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pullin
250. mory seat control is located on the driver door e To program position 1 move the driver seat mirrors and pedals Cif equipped to the desired position using the associated controls Press the SET control The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate While the light is illuminated press control 1 e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using control 2 A position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the RUN position e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is in the RUN position A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter UNLOCK control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for more information on how to use the keypad refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter REAR SEATS Head restraints if equipped Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head 147 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The head restraints can be moved up by pulling up on the head restraint Push release button to lower head restraint Split folding rear seat One or both rear seatbacks
251. n is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors driver seat position sensor and front passenger sensing system In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repe
252. n the driver s visor provides a convenient way to A replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by 106 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle ma
253. ncern through mediation Mediation is a process through which a representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options for settlement of your claim If mediation is not successful customers with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept it If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well If the arbitrator has decided in your favor and you accept the decision the BBB AUTO LINE program will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a timely manner Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE you will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them You will then be mailed a Customer Claim Form that you will need to complete provide proof of vehicle ownership sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guid
254. nd turning off your vehicle 121 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security When inserting the IKT into the ignition cylinder place your thumb on the center thumb rest of the IKT and forefinger on the logo badge on the opposite side To gain more leverage when rotating the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder you can readjust the location of your thumb to grasp the IKT on the outer edge next to the C control A Likewise when rotating the IKT to the 1 LOCK position in the ignition lock cylinder the bottom edge of the IKT adjacent to the A control can be utilized POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the m control to unlock all doors e Press the A control to lock all doors 122 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Smart locks This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control on the driver or passenger door trim panel all the doors will lock then all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by locking the driver s door with a key using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or locking the vehicle
255. nder certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 297 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1 4 turn on off feature When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off
256. nformation on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 42 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Cont
257. ng the VELCRO strips 3 Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub using the locating tabs to position the jack correctly 4 Insert the straight end of the jack retention bracket through the eyelet of the angled bracket and swing the retention bracket over the jack With the jack in place place the end of the retention bracket over the threaded stud in the trunk floor and secure it with the plastic wing nut If you are stowing the flat tire 1 Install the jack retention bracket as shown in Step 4 under Stowing the tire and jack without securing the jack beneath it 258 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Place the tire with the wheel facing downward into the spare tire well and secure the wheel with the large wing nut If you are stowing the temporary spare tire place the tire over the jack and secure it with the large wing nut QO CO WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the
258. ng C could damage the starter Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to LOCK wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel 222 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving This vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system which assists in starting the engine If the ignition key is turned to 4 START and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and
259. ng with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat Remove the obstruction s Gf found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner s Guide 170 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the s
260. nger sensing system can automatically turn off the passenger front airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from airbag deployments when they are improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag s after a collision Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information 151 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collisio
261. nificantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information 205 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System 206 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tire s under
262. not be retained properly in the event of a collision 6 Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety belts Follow the instructions in this chapter 7 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Attaching safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children attachments for child seat anchors Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the tether strap must also be attached to the proper tether anchor See Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter 186 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol All the LATCH lower anchors are equally spaced so that a single LATCH child seat can be installed at any rear seating position If two child safety seats are installed using the LATCH lower anchors they must be placed in the outboard seating positions only If three child safety seats are installed use the LATCH lower anchors for the cente
263. nsmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface 237 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts
264. nsmitter The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and or will not operate the remote entry features The theft indicator light may flash on and off Wait 20 seconds and you may repeat Steps 1 through 8 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait twenty seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 138 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The perimeter anti theft system will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed this system will respond if unauthorized entry is attempted When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the turn signal lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the 1 LOCK position or is removed from the ignition Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system e Press the a control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter When you press the lock co
265. ntinuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS is disabled due to a malfunction and needs to be serviced 225 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released have your brake system serviced immediately Parking brake P Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned ON until the parking brake is released o O BRAKE Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop
266. ntrol twice within three seconds on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors the hood and the trunk are closed If any of these are not closed the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door the hood or the trunk is still open Press the driver or passenger interior door lock control while the door is open then close the door 139 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Press the 7 e 8 and 9 0 controls on the keyless entry pad at the same time to lock the doors driver s door must be closed There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur before the vehicle becomes armed Each door the hood and the trunk is armed individually and if any are open they must be closed before the open entry point door hood or trunk can enter the 20 second countdown EN E es The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors the hood and the trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second countdown Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad Unlock the driver s door with a key Turn the key full rearward toward the rear of the vehicl
267. o not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used A third rear auxiliary power point is located on the rear of the center console The power point is accessible from the rear seat Cigar Cigarette lighter if equipped Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating this will damage the lighter element and socket The lighter will be released from its heating position when it is ready to be used Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty POWER WINDOWS Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings 95 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and e Push down to the first detent gt hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open th
268. oeds p10 Jo syuswerMbaI ay Joout ATUO p u po uSuy AOJEpURUT JOU ST IO IOJOW pu jq IN YJU S IO oTJEYJUAS JO SNg aseulep UOISSTUISUeI asNed ABUL pm popuounuo2 31 y Uey 19470 PIN Aue JO SA TELAIO IOIAIAS 4Da1109 oY DUTULIAJEp 0 WOUDUWAOLUL BOUDUATUIDUL PayNpayIS 0 Jae A eNOOMAW eNOOUAW osesn enp poeyloeds st yey pmy 10 PMJ A eNOOUAW OSN Auo pmoys A eNOOUAW ember yey suorsstusued ILWOMYV sosueyo pmy sutmp Area Aew yunou enjoy Ayoedeo Ty Arp eyeurrxoiddy AMA 12 S2 suoy es 00 CMa AdZd ue Ton pue MV AdZd eae AMV 1912 suoy es 9 0g Jequmny j1eg PIOA IO JUIN 118g PI0A 314 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Taurus 500 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 3 L DOHC V6 a B5L Required fuel 87 octane Firing order 1 4 2 5 3 6 Spark plug gap 0 052 0 056 inch 1 32 1 42 mm Ignition system Coil on plug Compression ratio Engine drivebelt routing e 3 5L V6 Engine 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine 2 Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine 315 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO that a Safety Compliance DATE XXKX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Certification Label be
269. of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The front passe
270. oin in the slot of the IKT near the key ring in order to remove the battery cover 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back X y surface of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the battery cover back onto the key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The IKT should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional IKTs you can either reprogram them yourself or take all IKTs to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself refer to Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock passive anti theft section of this chapter Note At least two IKTs are required to perform this procedure yourself 131 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security liluminated entry The interior lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate
271. old for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 109 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls MESSAGE CENTER With the ignition in the ON position the message center located on your XXXXXXXXXXXX h AAAA A NAAA A instrument cluster disp lays VXXX XXXXXXXXXX important vehicle information LAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAYAN through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select display features on the message center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime Selectable features Reset Press this control to select and reset functions shown in the INFO menu and SETUP menu Info menu This control displays the following control displays e Odometer e Trip Odometer e Distance to
272. on axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement see an authorized dealer 195 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 866 cm away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 866 cm away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair
273. onomy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regu
274. or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 276 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage 3 5L ENGINE PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are avail
275. or Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt A T Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether ay il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EL Master Lighting Switch 6 Ts Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Ad ry gt J 2 OOG eu oe 2 Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Bones Windows a Power Window Lockout Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage i Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil Engine Coolant Breme Coolant Temperature x Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Explosive Gas A Fan Warning Battery Acid Maintain Correct Fluid Power Steering Fluid Level TH 85 D gt LI ir Ge B Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter O Passenger Compartment 3 gt So Air Filter one Diede raii wW
276. ortion of the control to the second detent and release quickly A When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening 105 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls To close the moon roof To close press the front portion of the control to the first detent To activate the automatic one touch express close feature press the front portion of the control to the second detent and release quickly Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the moon roof is closing the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a prescribed position Bounce back override To override bounce back press and hold the front portion of the control For example Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals To vent To tilt the moon roof into the vent position when the glass panel is closed press and hold the front portion of the control To close the moon roof from the vent position press and hold the rear portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Wireless Control System located o
277. ose a slot within 5 seconds the system will choose for you To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc 35 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems If there is only one disc present in the system press A To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold 4 until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 19 CD slot Insert a CD MP3 label m side up Auxiliary input jack Line in Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary respon
278. ositions Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height squeeze the button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place a7 156 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy and safety belt pretensioners Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is a 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions m
279. ot become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system 241 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely aff
280. oth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Triple Clean U S only ZC 13 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wash and Wax Canada only CXC 95 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 281 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make
281. passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Empty seat Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can inc
282. pect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when youre driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 197 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels an
283. ppropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors 149 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that
284. protect from environmental effects 275 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body ow gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims
285. ps stay on by using the programming procedure that follows Note If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the headlamps on with windshield wipers feature If the windshield wipers are turned on for a fixed period of time the exterior lamps will turn on with headlamp control in the Autolamp position Autolamps Programmable exit delay Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to be changed To program the auto lamp exit time delay 1 Start with the ignition in the LOCK position and the headlamp control in the autolamp position 2 Turn the headlamp switch to O 81 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights 3 Turn the ignition switch to RUN and then back to LOCK 4 Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position The headlamps will turn on 5 Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want up to three minutes then turn the headlamp switch to The headlamps will turn off Fog lamp control if equipped 0 With the ignition on the fog lamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is pulled toward you and is in any of the following positions e Parking lamps PS e Low beams gD e Autolamps when active W The fog lamps will not operate when the high beams are active High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull y A the lever towards you to deactivate 82 2008 Taurus 500
286. r SELECT MINS is displayed Press A IV to adjust the hours minutes Press MENU again to disengage clock mode If your vehicle is equipped with an in dash clock refer to Setting the clock in the Driver Controls chapter CATEGORY satellite radio if equipped early availability Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display CATEGORY MODE In CATEGORY MODE press amp V to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press lt q SEEK b gt or SCAN to select the category After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK To select a different category press MENU until the category appears in the display Press A IV to select a different category You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Note If your vehicle is equipped with Satellite Radio you will either have the CATEGORY option above or the CATEOGRY option within the SATELLITE RADIO MENU below SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped late availability Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options 29 2008 Taurus 500 Owner
287. r car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help
288. r child safety seat however you must use child safety seats with lap shoulder belts and tether anchors for the outboard child seats Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back The LATCH anchors are below the locator symbols on the seat back Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without 187 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor Try to tilt the child seat from side to side Also try to tug the seat forward Check to see if the anchors hold
289. r optimum cooling system and engine protection FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled fp Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 296 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed
290. rease the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased 168 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below Small i e 3 ring Unilit Disabled binder small purse bottled water bis i re briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped Objects hanging off the seat back Objects stowed in the seatback map pocke
291. red memory position Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat and mirrors to the desired positions 2 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 3 Within five seconds press the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door panel to associate with the Driver 1 or Driver 2 position 4 Press the SET button again 5 Within five seconds press the 2 or button on the associated Integrated Keyhead Transmitter 6 Within five seconds press the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door panel to associate with the Driver 1 or Driver 2 position 7 Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 2 Within five seconds press the lock or unlock control on the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on the driver s door panel again 3 Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired 130 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Replacing the battery The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin c
292. rmatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to 69 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems
293. ronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar one on each side of the vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM The Safety Canopy system in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second row seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner along the entire side of the vehicle In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy system will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance
294. ry is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 260 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 261 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002
295. s Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmat
296. s present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e To clean use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e To help maintain its resiliency and color use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit ZC 11 D available from your authorized dealer In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 or an equivalent high quality leather care product e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based
297. s worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 194 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters
298. safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Export unique Non United States Canada vehicle specific information For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built f
299. sarm the perimeter anti theft system if equipped The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the key is held in the 4 START position The panic feature operates with the key in the 1 LOCK position If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem 128 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Unlocking the doors two stage unlock a 1 Press 3 and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to the 3 RUN position The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on using the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the 1 CLOCK position Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the and amp controls on the IKT for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled Locking th
300. se of adding sessions to it at a later time but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play Bit rate The player supports bit rates from 32 320 kbps as well as variable bit rate MP3 files but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder PC configuration Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer s resources Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor We recommend that you avoid running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion CD MP3 and CD player care Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player if equipped Always store discs out of direct sunlight Excessive heat may damage or warp discs Use care when handling and playing CD R and CD RW discs which are more susceptible to damage from heat light and stress than are regular CDs Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat with the playing surface facing down in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player Never insert any object other than a compact disc CD or digital versatile disc DVD into the p
301. se of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself Refer to Programming spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster e When the ignition is in the 1 N LOCK position the ind
302. sibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle is equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 36 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume
303. ss repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped EN LINE IN auxiliary audio mode SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 satellite radio if equipped and SYNC if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC please refer to the SYNC supplement 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt q gt to access the previous next strong station In CD mode press lt q gt to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press A SEEK SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected 24 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Jazz Rock News etc press lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK SEEK p gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press A SEEK SEEK B gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your
304. stems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various 7 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y y Jm 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps of tasks on your work computer J1 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system 997 A mp3 L mp3 LP doc El ppt xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of
305. such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pul
306. sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning cigarettes material away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 282 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD imp 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column s 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and D a release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 283 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L V6 ENGINE 4 Power steering fluid reservoir LL EEN 1 EET Engine coolant reservoir Brake fluid reservoir
307. t if equipped Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above 169 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system In case there is a problem with the o front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interferi
308. t 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Put the jack in the jack notch next to the tire you are changing ZA Turn the jack handle clockwise until OO the wheel is completely off the ground lt L Pal o agg L 0 G lt w N X A O Z APES 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 Install the wheel cover if equipped The wheel cover will only install if the Ford Mercury logo is aligned over the valve stem on the wheel 257 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Stowing the tire and jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the lug wrench socket into the handle and place the jack and wrench into the felt bag as shown Take care to position the jack as shown to ensure that the locating holes in the jack base can be placed on the locating tabs of the jack mounting bracket in the spare tire tub 2 Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag usi
309. t CD Press again to stop Playing MP3 discs To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system label side up 4 The folder track and elapsed time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the Artist Title Album and File Name COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD MP3 passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder Press again to stop FOLDER LIST Press access folder mode and to go to the previous next folder in the MP3 disc MP3 disc quality factors Several factors can effect disc playback quality e Disc capacity Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage e Disc type Some CD RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD R discs DVD MP3 FOLDER TRACK 00 24 gt lt No Info gt ELP The Only Way mp3 64 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Disc finalization The disc may be left open for the purpo
310. t O e Move control down to disengage n childproof lock H B The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e When the childproof door locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the power door locks are unlocked 126 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle To open the luggage compartment door lid from within the luggage compartment pull the illuminated T shaped handle and push up on the trunk lid The handle is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light The T shaped handle will be located either on the luggage compartment door lid or inside the luggage compartment near the tail lamps Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child s reach Unsupervised children could lock themselves
311. t as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles For disposal of airbags or airbag equipped vehicles see your authorized dealer Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags 176 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U S and Canada If small children generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 Ib 18 kg or less ride in your vehicle you must put them in safety seats made especially for children Many states require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight years old Check your local and state or provinci
312. t increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Infl
313. t is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire 253 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet wea
314. tandard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 210 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity Chow much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle ro
315. te Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 RUN position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 RUN position to the 1 LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 RUN position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry key pad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled 124 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002
316. ted the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 159 Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day The more we events drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If uncomfortable you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort I was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks crashes many when no other vehicles are around
317. temperature 290 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration
318. temperature control Press to engage disengage separate passenger side temperature control 5 g Passenger heated seat control Press once to activate high heat setting 2 indicator lights press again to activate low heat setting 1 indicator light and press again to deactivate the passenger heated seat 6 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections T A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO defrost and floor defrost 78 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 8 Airflow direction control Press to toggle through the air distribution modes listed below The selected mode will be shown in the display 74 Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console vents if equipped Distributes air through the instrument panel floor and center console vents if equipped A Distributes air through the floor vents Note You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the demister and defroster vents T D
319. th the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door if equipped with memory feature Refer to Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 100 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 3 Press the SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator O light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control To disengage the speed control e Depress the brake pedal or press CNCL Cancel Disengaging the speed control
320. the World Wide Fuel Charter 300 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right Fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The Service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the Service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engin
321. the A or B headphone source Then press MEDIA to select the desired playing media for that headset When a headphone channel has been selected A or B selections will affect the source on that channel only 49 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Note Headphone A can access any possible media AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Headphone B can only access DVD and DVD AUX For further information refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 2 BE A Stop Eject Press once to stop and press a second time to eject a disc from the DVD system 3 lt lt Reverse Press and release for the previous chapter or track Press and hold to reverse search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 4 P Fast forward Press and release for the next chapter or track Press and hold to forward search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 5 1L Play Pause Press Play to select DVD mode and to turn the DVD system on if it is off If a disc is present it will resume or begin to play Press Pause while playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD 6 On Off Press to turn the DVD z system On Off Q 7 VIDEO Press repeatedly to cycle through the following video state options which will be indicated on the bottom right hand corner of the display DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD and Off no indicator If you select the DVD AUX video source the displa
322. the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 269 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in achieving satisfaction by following the three step procedure outlined on the front page of the Warranty Guide However if your warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration Initially the BBB will try to resolve your question or co
323. ther driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible 254 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface set the parking brake and activate hazard flashers 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off Removing the spare tire and jack 1 Lift the trunk cargo cover and remove the wing nut that secures the spare tire by turning it counterc
324. tions Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 319 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index A Accessory delay ceceeeeeees 97 Advance Trac sseieisyrsrrer isr 227 Air cleaner filter 310 311 Air conditioning 0 76 78 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTEM ienesis 162 168 171 173 and child safety seats 164 description 163 171 173 disposal vissacricasterceidevncer aude hits 176 driver airbag 165 172 174 indicator light sesse 171 176 operation wee 165 172 174 passenger airbag 165 172 174 side airbag
325. to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist 193 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm sys 7y When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire i
326. turn the ignition to the 3 RUN position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 RUN position to the 1 LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 RUN position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 125 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the 1 LOCK position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 JEDE E E The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e Move control up to engage the childproof lock 4
327. ual Play Press to toggle between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function 13 Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 15 MEDIA Press to cycle through the possible media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD LINE IN Gf equipped DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources 16 VIDEO Press to cycle through video states DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD Off 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the FES 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections Press MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set up menu 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 54 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 23 ILLUMINATION
328. ur vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 6 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 6 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to
329. urces over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways 59 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and the same source is playing through the front and rear speakers SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 DVD or DVD AUX media sources over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel Press d on the DVD player to am listen to audio over the headphones The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone control
330. us Entertainment Systems 1 Power control Press to turn the FES Family Entertainment System ON OFF 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a Menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of the FES functions and adjustments 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 ANGLE DVD dependent Press to select the angle to view the scene 6 Channel A B Press to select either A or B headphones and then use the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones 7 VOL Volume When in Single Play press to increase or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones 53 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD 10 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current CD MP3 disc in random order 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD or CD MP3 12 q iM Speaker Headphone Single D
331. us Tires Wheels and Loading following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is sig
332. uses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse link cartridge o asa Natural Natural o Orange Green Green P Ret Red Rea o Bue eow Yellow Cete a ee a P Natural Black Black 246 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel gt N N a a Jal NI NI iO ol I o Kel 7 Cz cs cs Cio C16 gt co o z no i fro i tro o fry a e el N Cm e Je lel lel foo lel foo lis e io Jo a C7 Gs The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Location Rating Panel Description 30A 2 15A Brake on off switch High mounted brake lamp SDARS Bluetooth Family entertainment system FES Rear seat control 30A PGT 20 247 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
333. vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion 1 To disable enable the autolock feature select this function from the T 17 SETUP control for the current RUI GLOLK display mode lt ON gt OFF 2 Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF Autounlock if equipped This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off 1 To disable enable the autounlock feature select this function from the T N V4 SETUP control for the current AUT om LOLA display mode lt ON gt OFF 2 Press the RESET control switch to turn the autounlock ON or OFF Easy entry exit seat if equipped This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit from the vehicle 1 To disable enable the easy entry exit seat feature select this EASY ENTRY function from the SETUP control for lt ON gt OFF the current display mode 2 Press the RESET control to turn the easy entry exit seat ON or OFF System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems 116 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several seconds The message center will display the last selecte
334. voir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 118 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls OIL CHANGE REQUIRED CHANGE OIL SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5 percent or less When oil life left is between 5 and 0 the CHANGE OIL SOON message will be displayed When oil life left reaches 0 the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL Press the remote trunk release s aa control on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel A Rear sunshade if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear sunshade that covers the rear window of your vehicle To install the shade Pull the shade up and hook the shade into the headliner clips in the rear roof panel t gt To stow the shade Unhook the T shade from the headliner clips in the rear roof panel and let the na roll back into the package 57O a y A i To reduce the risk of injuries the sunshade must be properly attached to the headliner clips in the rear roof panels 119 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo net if equipped The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the l net to the anchors provided Do not put more than 50 lb
335. w and follow the information presented in the Airbag Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Automatic locking mode e LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48 lb 22 kg in a child restraint Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 lb 27 kg in a child restraint and to provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 lb 86 kg using an upper torso harness and a belt positioning booster Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and tether anchors For more information on top tether straps 181 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints and anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children attach
336. wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 259 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new batte
337. with the keyless entry keypad If both front doors are closed the vehicle can be locked from any method regardless of whether the Key is in the ignition or not Autolock feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the 3 RUN position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than 2 seconds The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 RUN position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than 2 seconds Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure or e or by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature 123 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 LOCK position and all vehicle doors are closed You must comple
338. wn personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 To associate the entry code with a memory setting enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code e Pressing 1 e 2 recalls Driver 1 settings e Pressing 3 e 4 recalls Driver 2 settings e Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode has been programmed to the module 134 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered 7 times 35 conse
339. xact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty In the United States you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your authorized dealer or by calling 1 800 FORD CLUB Similarly in Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance
340. ximately 3 hours of operation Block heater operation longer than 3 hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity 224 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply co
341. y require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches ae 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released 107 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e If t
342. y will turn off if there is no video signal detected When a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input and the display is in the DVD AUX video mode the display will automatically turn on 8 Infrared IR Receiver amp Transmitter System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the infrared IR wireless headphones 50 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 9 LCD screen The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched into the housing when being stored 10 Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase VOLUME A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 11 A q Headphones Speakers Press once for Dual Play Headphone mode the rear speakers are muted and press again for Single Play same media playing through all speakers You can also press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function For further interaction information refer to Single Play Dual play 12 MEDIA Press repeatedly to select from the various possible ma playing media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX
343. y with aftermarket audio systems headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the FES will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system without interface to the radio 72 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A and B will be connected to FES DISC NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System Refer to the Navigation supplement for further information SYNC LATE AVAILABILITY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC chapter in the Navigation supplement if equipped 73 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CO
344. yer then press Play HL to begin to play the disc If a DVD is already loaded into the system press PLAY on the DVD player Note If sound can be heard but no video is present press VIDEO to select the video source DVD or aux inputs Press VIDEO to change the source displayed on the screen Press repeatedly to cycle through DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD OFF 45 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Press the power button to turn the system OFF The indicator light will IN turn off indicating the system is off eo Note The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers and can be adjusted by the radio volume control To play a CD in the DVD system The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a CD into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a CD in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and the CD Audio Disc screen will display From this screen you can also select from COMPRESSION SHUFFLE and SCAN features To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system 1 Ensure
345. your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected 226 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Push the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy Note If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied a chime will sound ADVANCETRAC ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL IF EQUIPPED The AdvanceTrac system helps the driver maintain the stability and steer ability of the vehicle The system integrates anti lock braking system ABS and Traction Control and a more advanced function to further enhance the stability of the vehicle AdvanceTrac constantly monitors the vehicle motion relative to the driver s intended course This is done by using added sensors that compare the steering inputs from the driver with the actual motion of the vehicle AdvanceTrac determines whether an engine torque reduction or brake application is needed to help control the vehicle If the vehicle begins to rotate excessively left or right spin out or slide sideways the system will attempt to correct the excessive motion If the vehicle does not respond to steering inputs the system will attempt to increase the turning response of the vehic
346. ystem if a disc is not already loaded press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the last loaded disc will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for further information 3 In CD MP3 mode you can access the following features Press lt Q SEEK SEEK P to access the previous next tracks seex seek Press and hold REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track Press and hold FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track While in folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available While in folder mode press FOLDER P to access the next folder on MP3 discs if available 18 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle a mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in th
347. ystem is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light ee J for front and side airbag system will either flash or stay lit IN e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system y Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback 171 2008 Taurus 500 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag See your authorized dealer All

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LOEWE ART 50 50" Full HD 3D compatibility Smart TV Wi-Fi Brown  PD82・89 高精度気体用重錘型圧力計    Manual Técnico pdf  Benutzerhandbuch  Treinamento de Presidência de Classe  - Fire Files Software  取扱説明書  Vastringue à semelle concave  user`s manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file